blob: 6d347d624e2ce359bcf1bbd879c0ef5c165951d4 [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
14#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000015#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
16#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000018#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
19#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
21#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000022#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000023#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000024#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000026#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000027#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000028#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000029#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
30#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
32#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
33#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
34#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
35#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
37#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
38#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
39#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000040#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000041#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000042#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000043#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000044#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000045#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
46#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000047#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000048#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000049#include <algorithm>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000050#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000051#include <set>
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000052using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000053using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000054
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000055#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
56
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000057// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
58// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
59// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
60// minimum reasonable default.
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000061static cl::opt<unsigned>
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000062PHINodeFoldingThreshold("phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
63 cl::desc("Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000064
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000065static cl::opt<bool>
66DupRet("simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
67 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
68
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000069static cl::opt<bool>
70SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
71 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
72
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +000073static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
74 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
75 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +000076
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000077static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
78 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
79 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
80 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
81 "predicated store"));
82
83static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
84 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
85 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
86 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
87
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +000088static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
89 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
90 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
91 "executed"));
92
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +000093static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
94 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
95 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
96 "speculatively executed instructions"));
97
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +000098STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +000099STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000100STATISTIC(NumLookupTables, "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +0000101STATISTIC(NumLookupTablesHoles, "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000102STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000103STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons, "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000104STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000105
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000106namespace {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000107 // The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
Sanjay Patel9361d352015-09-10 16:31:19 +0000108 // case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
109 // cases composing the case group.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000110 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>
111 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy;
112 // The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
Sanjay Patel9361d352015-09-10 16:31:19 +0000113 // and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
114 // switch for that PHI.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000115 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> SwitchCaseResultsTy;
116
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000117 /// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
118 struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
119 ConstantInt *Value;
120 BasicBlock *Dest;
121
122 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
123 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
124
125 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
126 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
127 return Value < RHS.Value;
128 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000129
130 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000131 };
132
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000133class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000134 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000135 const DataLayout &DL;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +0000136 unsigned BonusInstThreshold;
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +0000137 AssumptionCache *AC;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000138 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000139 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
140 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TerminatorInst *TI,
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000141 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000142 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000143 BasicBlock *Pred,
144 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000145 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
146 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000147
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000148 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000149 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000150 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
151 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000152 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000153 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000154 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000155 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +0000156 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder <> &Builder);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000157 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder <>&Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000158
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000159public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000160 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000161 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
162 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders)
163 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), BonusInstThreshold(BonusInstThreshold), AC(AC),
164 LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders) {}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000165 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
166};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000167}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000168
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000169/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000170/// terminator instructions together.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000171static bool SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2) {
172 if (SI1 == SI2) return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000173
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000174 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
175 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
176 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
177 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
178 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Chris Lattnerb7b75142007-04-02 01:44:59 +0000179 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000180
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000181 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
182 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
183 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000184 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
185 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
186 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB))
187 return false;
188 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000189
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000190 return true;
191}
192
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000193/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
194/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
195/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000196static bool isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1,
197 BranchInst *SI2,
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000198 Instruction *Cond,
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000199 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode*> &PhiNodes) {
200 if (SI1 == SI2) return false; // Can't merge with self!
201 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
202
203 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000204 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000205 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
206 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
207 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
208 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
209 if (!Ci2) return false;
210 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
211 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
212 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
213 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
214 return false;
215
216 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
217 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
218 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000219 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
220 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
221 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000222 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
223 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000224 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000225 return false;
226 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
227 }
228 return true;
229}
230
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000231/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
232/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
233/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
234/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000235static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
236 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000237 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin())) return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000238
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000239 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000240 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin(); (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000241 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000242}
243
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000244/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
245/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
246/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000247/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000248static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000249 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000250 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000251 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000252 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000253}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000254
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000255/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
256/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000257/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
258/// which works well enough for us.
259///
260/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000261/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
262/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
263/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
264/// set and true is returned.
265///
266/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
267/// Select whose cost is 2.
268///
269/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
270/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
271/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000272static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Craig Topper71b7b682014-08-21 05:55:13 +0000273 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction*> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000274 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000275 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
276 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000277 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
278 // so limit the recursion depth.
279 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
280 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
281 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
282 return false;
283
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000284 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000285 if (!I) {
286 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
287 // can be executed unconditionally.
288 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
289 if (C->canTrap())
290 return false;
291 return true;
292 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000293 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000294
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000295 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000296 // the bottom of this block.
297 if (PBB == BB) return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000298
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000299 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
300 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000301 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
302 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000303 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000304 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000305
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000306 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
307 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000308 if (!AggressiveInsts) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000309
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000310 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
311 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I)) return true;
312
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000313 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
314 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
315 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000316 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000317 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000318
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000319 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000320
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000321 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
322 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
323 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
324 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
325 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
326 // enabled further IR optimizations.
327 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
328 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts->empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000329 return false;
330
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000331 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
332 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000333
334 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
335 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000336 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000337 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
338 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000339 return false;
340 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
341 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000342 return true;
343}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000344
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000345/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000346/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000347static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000348 // Normal constant int.
349 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000350 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000351 return CI;
352
353 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
354 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000355 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000356
357 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
358 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
359 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
360
361 // IntToPtr const int.
362 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
363 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
364 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
365 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
366 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
367 return CI;
368 else
369 return cast<ConstantInt>
370 (ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
371 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000372 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000373}
374
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000375namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000376
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000377/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
378/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
379/// structure.
380/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
381/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
382/// representing the different cases for the switch.
383/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
384/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
385/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
386/// fail.
387struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000388 const DataLayout &DL;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000389 Value *CompValue; /// Value found for the switch comparison
390 Value *Extra; /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
391 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals; /// Set of integers to match in switch
392 unsigned UsedICmps; /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000393
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000394 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000395 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL)
396 : DL(DL), CompValue(nullptr), Extra(nullptr), UsedICmps(0) {
397 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000398 }
399
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000400 /// Prevent copy
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000401 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000402 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000403 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000404
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000405private:
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000406
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000407 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
408 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
409 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +0000410 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal) return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000411 CompValue = NewVal;
412 return (CompValue != nullptr);
413 }
414
415 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
416 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
417 /// match depending on isEQ).
418 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
419 /// against is placed in CompValue.
420 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
421 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000422 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000423 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
424 ICmpInst *ICI;
425 ConstantInt *C;
426 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
427 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
428 return false;
429 }
430
431 Value *RHSVal;
432 ConstantInt *RHSC;
433
434 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000435 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000436 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
437 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ:ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
438 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
439 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC)))) {
440 APInt Not = ~RHSC->getValue();
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000441 if (Not.isPowerOf2() && C->getValue().isPowerOf2() &&
442 Not != C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000443 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
444 if(!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
445 return false;
446
447 Vals.push_back(C);
448 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
449 C->getValue() | Not));
450 UsedICmps++;
451 return true;
452 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000453 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000454
455 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
456 if(!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
457 return false;
458
459 UsedICmps++;
460 Vals.push_back(C);
461 return ICI->getOperand(0);
462 }
463
464 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000465 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
466 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000467
468 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
469 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
470 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
471 if(match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC)))) {
472 Span = Span.subtract(RHSC->getValue());
473 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
474 }
475
476 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
477 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
478 // x != 0 && x != 1.
479 if (!isEQ)
480 Span = Span.inverse();
481
482 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
483 if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
484 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000485 }
486
487 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000488 if(!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
489 return false;
490
491 // Add all values from the range to the set
492 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
493 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000494
495 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000496 return true;
497
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000498 }
499
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000500 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000501 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
502 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
503 /// vector.
504 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000505 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000506 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
507 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000508
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000509 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
510 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000511 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000512
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000513 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000514 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000515 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000516
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000517 while(!DFT.empty()) {
518 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000519
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000520 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
521 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
522 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000523 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
524 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
525 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
526 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000527 continue;
528 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000529
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000530 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000531 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000532 // Match succeed, continue the loop
533 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000534 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000535
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000536 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
537 // comparison against the same value as the others.
538 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
539 if (!Extra) {
540 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000541 continue;
542 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000543 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
544 CompValue = nullptr;
545 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000546 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000547 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000548};
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000549
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000550}
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000551
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000552static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000553 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000554 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
555 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
556 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
557 if (BI->isConditional())
558 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000559 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
560 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000561 }
562
563 TI->eraseFromParent();
564 if (Cond) RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
565}
566
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000567/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000568/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000569Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000570 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000571 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
572 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
573 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000574 if (SI->getNumSuccessors()*std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
575 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <= 128)
576 CV = SI->getCondition();
577 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000578 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000579 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000580 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000581 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000582 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000583
584 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000585 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000586 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
587 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000588 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000589 CV = Ptr;
590 }
591 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000592 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000593}
594
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000595/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000596/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000597BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000598GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TerminatorInst *TI,
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000599 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase>
600 &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000601 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000602 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
603 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e; ++i)
604 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(),
605 i.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000606 return SI->getDefaultDest();
607 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000608
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000609 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000610 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000611 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
612 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1),
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000613 DL),
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000614 Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000615 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000616}
617
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000618
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000619/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000620/// in the list that match the specified block.
621static void EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
622 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000623 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000624}
625
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000626/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000627static bool
628ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
629 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase > &C2) {
630 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
631
632 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
633 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
634 std::swap(V1, V2);
635
636 if (V1->size() == 0) return false;
637 if (V1->size() == 1) {
638 // Just scan V2.
639 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
640 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
641 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
642 return true;
643 }
644
645 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
646 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
647 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
648 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
649 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
650 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
651 return true;
652 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
653 ++i1;
654 else
655 ++i2;
656 }
657 return false;
658}
659
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000660/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
661/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
662/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
663/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
664/// very limited form of jump threading.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000665bool SimplifyCFGOpt::
666SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000667 BasicBlock *Pred,
668 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000669 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
670 if (!PredVal) return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
671
672 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
673 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
674 if (ThisVal != PredVal) return false; // Different predicates.
675
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000676 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
677 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
678
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000679 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000680 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000681 BasicBlock *PredDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(),
682 PredCases);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000683 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000684
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000685 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000686 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000687 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000688 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000689
690 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
691 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
692 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
693 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
694 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
695 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000696 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000697 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000698
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000699 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
700 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
701 // uncond br.
702 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
703 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000704 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000705 (void) NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000706
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000707 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000708 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000709
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000710 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
711 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000712
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000713 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
714 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000715 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000716
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000717 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
718 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000719 SmallPtrSet<Constant*, 16> DeadCases;
720 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
721 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000722
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000723 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000724 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000725
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000726 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
727 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000728 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000729 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
730 if (HasWeight)
731 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
732 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000733 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000734 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
735 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000736 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
737 --i;
738 if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000739 if (HasWeight) {
740 std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex()+1], Weights.back());
741 Weights.pop_back();
742 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000743 i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
744 SI->removeCase(i);
745 }
746 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000747 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000748 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
749 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).
750 createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000751
752 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000753 return true;
754 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000755
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000756 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
757 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000758 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000759 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000760 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
761 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000762 if (TIV)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000763 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
764 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
765 }
766 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000767
768 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
769 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000770 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000771 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
772 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
773 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
774 break;
775 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000776
777 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000778 if (!TheRealDest) TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000779
780 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
781 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000782 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
783 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
784 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000785 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000786 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000787
788 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000789 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000790 (void) NI;
791
792 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
793 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI << "\n");
794
795 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
796 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000797}
798
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000799namespace {
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000800 /// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000801 /// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
802 /// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
803 struct ConstantIntOrdering {
804 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
805 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
806 }
807 };
808}
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000809
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000810static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
811 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
812 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
813 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000814 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000815 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000816 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000817}
818
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000819static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction* I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000820 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000821 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
822 if (MDString* MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
823 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
824
825 return false;
826}
827
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000828/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
829/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
830/// metadata.
831static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
832 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000833 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000834 assert(MD);
835 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000836 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000837 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000838 }
839
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000840 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
841 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
842 // default weight to be the first entry.
843 if (BranchInst* BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
844 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
845 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
846 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
847 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000848 }
849}
850
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000851/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000852static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000853 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
854 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
855 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
856 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
857 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000858 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000859}
860
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000861/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
862/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000863/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
864/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000865bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
866 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000867 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
868 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
869 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
870 bool Changed = false;
871
Chris Lattner6b39cb92008-02-18 07:42:56 +0000872 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000873 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000874 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000875
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000876 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
877 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
878 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
879
880 if (PCV == CV && SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI)) {
881 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000882 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000883 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
884
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000885 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000886 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
887
888 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
889 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
890 // build.
Chris Lattner6b39cb92008-02-18 07:42:56 +0000891 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000892
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000893 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
894 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000895 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
896 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
897
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000898 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000899 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000900 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000901 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
902 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
903 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000904 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
905 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
906 // successor's weights
907 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000908
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000909 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000910 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000911 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000912 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000913 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
914 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
915 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000916 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000917
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000918 if (PredDefault == BB) {
919 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
920 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000921 std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
922 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
923 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
924 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
925 else {
926 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
927 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000928
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000929 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
930 // Increase weight for the default case.
931 Weights[0] += Weights[i+1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000932 std::swap(Weights[i+1], Weights.back());
933 Weights.pop_back();
934 }
935
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000936 PredCases.pop_back();
937 --i; --e;
938 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000939
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000940 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000941 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
942 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
943 PredDefault = BBDefault;
944 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
945 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000946
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000947 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
948 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000949 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
950 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
951 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
952 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
953 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000954 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
955 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
956 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
957 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
958 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i+1]);
959 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i+1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000960 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000961 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000962
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000963 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
964 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
965 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
966 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
967 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
968 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
969 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
970 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000971 } else {
972 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
973 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
974 // activated.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000975 std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000976 std::map<ConstantInt*, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000977 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
978 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
979 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000980
981 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
982 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i+1];
983 std::swap(Weights[i+1], Weights.back());
984 Weights.pop_back();
985 }
986
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000987 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
988 PredCases.pop_back();
989 --i; --e;
990 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000991
992 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
993 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000994 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
995 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
996 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000997 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
998 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000999 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1000 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
1001 PTIHandled.erase(BBCases[i].Value);// This constant is taken care of
1002 }
1003
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001004 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1005 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001006 for (std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering>::iterator I =
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001007 PTIHandled.begin(),
1008 E = PTIHandled.end(); I != E; ++I) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001009 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1010 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[*I]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001011 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(*I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001012 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001013 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001014 }
1015
1016 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1017 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1018 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001019 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1020 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001021
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001022 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001023 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001024 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001025 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001026 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001027 }
1028
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001029 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001030 SwitchInst *NewSI = Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault,
1031 PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001032 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001033 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1034 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001035
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001036 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1037 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1038 FitWeights(Weights);
1039
1040 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1041
1042 NewSI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
1043 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).
1044 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
1045 }
1046
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001047 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001048
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001049 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1050 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1051 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001052 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001053 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1054 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001055 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001056 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001057 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00001058 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
1059 "infloop", BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001060 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001061 }
1062 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1063 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001064
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001065 Changed = true;
1066 }
1067 }
1068 return Changed;
1069}
1070
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001071// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1072// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1073// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001074static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1075 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001076 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001077 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001078 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001079 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1080 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1081 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1082 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V==I1 || BB2V==I2)) {
1083 return false;
1084 }
1085 }
1086 }
1087 return true;
1088}
1089
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001090static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1091
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001092/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1093/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1094/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001095static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001096 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001097 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1098 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1099 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1100 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1101 // identical order.
1102 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1103 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
1104
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001105 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1106 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1107
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001108 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001109 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1110 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1111 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1112 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1113 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001114 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001115 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001116 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001117 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001118 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001119 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001120 return false;
1121
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001122 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001123
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001124 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001125 do {
1126 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1127 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1128 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1129 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001130
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001131 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1132 return Changed;
1133
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001134 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1135 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1136 // the now redundant second instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001137 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001138 if (!I2->use_empty())
1139 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Dan Gohmanc8a27f22009-08-25 22:11:20 +00001140 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001141 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {
Piotr Padlewskidc9b2cf2015-10-02 22:12:22 +00001142 LLVMContext::MD_tbaa, LLVMContext::MD_range,
1143 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath, LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
Artur Pilipenko5c5011d2015-11-02 17:53:51 +00001144 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull, LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1145 LLVMContext::MD_align, LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
Hal Finkele4c0c162016-04-26 02:06:06 +00001146 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1147 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access};
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001148 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001149 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001150 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001151
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001152 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1153 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001154 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1155 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1156 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1157 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1158 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001159 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001160 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001161 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001162 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001163 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001164
1165 return true;
1166
1167HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001168 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1169 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001170 return Changed;
1171
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001172 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001173 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001174 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001175 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1176 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1177 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1178 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1179 continue;
1180
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001181 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1182 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1183 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, PN) ||
1184 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, PN))
1185 return Changed;
1186
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001187 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001188 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001189 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001190 return Changed;
1191 }
1192 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001193
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001194 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001195 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001196 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001197 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001198 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1199 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001200 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001201 }
1202
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001203 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001204 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1205 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1206 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1207 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
1208 std::map<std::pair<Value*,Value*>, SelectInst*> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001209 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001210 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001211 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001212 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001213 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1214 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001215 if (BB1V == BB2V) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001216
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001217 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1218 // that determines the right value.
1219 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001220 if (!SI)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001221 SI = cast<SelectInst>
1222 (Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
Sanjay Patel29dea0d2016-04-26 23:15:48 +00001223 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001224
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001225 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1226 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1227 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1228 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001229 }
1230 }
1231
1232 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001233 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1234 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001235
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001236 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001237 return true;
1238}
1239
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001240/// Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001241/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1242/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1243/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1244static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1245 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
1246 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI1->getParent();
1247 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1248
1249 // Check that BBEnd has two predecessors and the other predecessor ends with
1250 // an unconditional branch.
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001251 pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BBEnd), PE = pred_end(BBEnd);
1252 BasicBlock *Pred0 = *PI++;
1253 if (PI == PE) // Only one predecessor.
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001254 return false;
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001255 BasicBlock *Pred1 = *PI++;
1256 if (PI != PE) // More than two predecessors.
1257 return false;
1258 BasicBlock *BB2 = (Pred0 == BB1) ? Pred1 : Pred0;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001259 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB2->getTerminator());
1260 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isUnconditional())
1261 return false;
1262
1263 // Gather the PHI nodes in BBEnd.
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001264 SmallDenseMap<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, PHINode *> JointValueMap;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001265 Instruction *FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = nullptr;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001266 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BBEnd->begin(), E = BBEnd->end(); I != E; ++I) {
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001267 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) {
1268 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001269 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001270 JointValueMap[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)] = PN;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001271 } else {
1272 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = &*I;
1273 break;
1274 }
1275 }
1276 if (!FirstNonPhiInBBEnd)
1277 return false;
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001278
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001279 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1280 // instructions in the two blocks. We scan backward for obviously identical
1281 // instructions in an identical order.
1282 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RI1 = BB1->getInstList().rbegin(),
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001283 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend(),
1284 RI2 = BB2->getInstList().rbegin(),
1285 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001286 // Skip debug info.
1287 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1)) ++RI1;
1288 if (RI1 == RE1)
1289 return false;
1290 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2)) ++RI2;
1291 if (RI2 == RE2)
1292 return false;
1293 // Skip the unconditional branches.
1294 ++RI1;
1295 ++RI2;
1296
1297 bool Changed = false;
1298 while (RI1 != RE1 && RI2 != RE2) {
1299 // Skip debug info.
1300 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1)) ++RI1;
1301 if (RI1 == RE1)
1302 return Changed;
1303 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2)) ++RI2;
1304 if (RI2 == RE2)
1305 return Changed;
1306
1307 Instruction *I1 = &*RI1, *I2 = &*RI2;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001308 auto InstPair = std::make_pair(I1, I2);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001309 // I1 and I2 should have a single use in the same PHI node, and they
1310 // perform the same operation.
1311 // Cannot move control-flow-involving, volatile loads, vaarg, etc.
1312 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || isa<PHINode>(I2) ||
1313 isa<TerminatorInst>(I1) || isa<TerminatorInst>(I2) ||
David Majnemerba275f92015-08-19 19:54:02 +00001314 I1->isEHPad() || I2->isEHPad() ||
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001315 isa<AllocaInst>(I1) || isa<AllocaInst>(I2) ||
1316 I1->mayHaveSideEffects() || I2->mayHaveSideEffects() ||
1317 I1->mayReadOrWriteMemory() || I2->mayReadOrWriteMemory() ||
1318 !I1->hasOneUse() || !I2->hasOneUse() ||
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001319 !JointValueMap.count(InstPair))
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001320 return Changed;
1321
1322 // Check whether we should swap the operands of ICmpInst.
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001323 // TODO: Add support of communativity.
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001324 ICmpInst *ICmp1 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I1), *ICmp2 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I2);
1325 bool SwapOpnds = false;
1326 if (ICmp1 && ICmp2 &&
1327 ICmp1->getOperand(0) != ICmp2->getOperand(0) &&
1328 ICmp1->getOperand(1) != ICmp2->getOperand(1) &&
1329 (ICmp1->getOperand(0) == ICmp2->getOperand(1) ||
1330 ICmp1->getOperand(1) == ICmp2->getOperand(0))) {
1331 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1332 SwapOpnds = true;
1333 }
1334 if (!I1->isSameOperationAs(I2)) {
1335 if (SwapOpnds)
1336 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1337 return Changed;
1338 }
1339
1340 // The operands should be either the same or they need to be generated
1341 // with a PHI node after sinking. We only handle the case where there is
1342 // a single pair of different operands.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001343 Value *DifferentOp1 = nullptr, *DifferentOp2 = nullptr;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001344 unsigned Op1Idx = ~0U;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001345 for (unsigned I = 0, E = I1->getNumOperands(); I != E; ++I) {
1346 if (I1->getOperand(I) == I2->getOperand(I))
1347 continue;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001348 // Early exit if we have more-than one pair of different operands or if
1349 // we need a PHI node to replace a constant.
1350 if (Op1Idx != ~0U ||
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001351 isa<Constant>(I1->getOperand(I)) ||
1352 isa<Constant>(I2->getOperand(I))) {
1353 // If we can't sink the instructions, undo the swapping.
1354 if (SwapOpnds)
1355 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1356 return Changed;
1357 }
1358 DifferentOp1 = I1->getOperand(I);
1359 Op1Idx = I;
1360 DifferentOp2 = I2->getOperand(I);
1361 }
1362
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001363 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK common instructions " << *I1 << "\n");
1364 DEBUG(dbgs() << " " << *I2 << "\n");
1365
1366 // We insert the pair of different operands to JointValueMap and
1367 // remove (I1, I2) from JointValueMap.
1368 if (Op1Idx != ~0U) {
1369 auto &NewPN = JointValueMap[std::make_pair(DifferentOp1, DifferentOp2)];
1370 if (!NewPN) {
1371 NewPN =
1372 PHINode::Create(DifferentOp1->getType(), 2,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001373 DifferentOp1->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001374 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp1, BB1);
1375 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp2, BB2);
1376 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Create PHI node " << *NewPN << "\n";);
1377 }
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001378 // I1 should use NewPN instead of DifferentOp1.
1379 I1->setOperand(Op1Idx, NewPN);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001380 }
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001381 PHINode *OldPN = JointValueMap[InstPair];
1382 JointValueMap.erase(InstPair);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001383
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001384 // We need to update RE1 and RE2 if we are going to sink the first
1385 // instruction in the basic block down.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00001386 bool UpdateRE1 = (I1 == &BB1->front()), UpdateRE2 = (I2 == &BB2->front());
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001387 // Sink the instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001388 BBEnd->getInstList().splice(FirstNonPhiInBBEnd->getIterator(),
1389 BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001390 if (!OldPN->use_empty())
1391 OldPN->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1392 OldPN->eraseFromParent();
1393
1394 if (!I2->use_empty())
1395 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1396 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Philip Reamesd92c2a72014-10-22 16:37:13 +00001397 // TODO: Use combineMetadata here to preserve what metadata we can
1398 // (analogous to the hoisting case above).
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001399 I2->eraseFromParent();
1400
1401 if (UpdateRE1)
1402 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend();
1403 if (UpdateRE2)
1404 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001405 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = &*I1;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001406 NumSinkCommons++;
1407 Changed = true;
1408 }
1409 return Changed;
1410}
1411
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001412/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1413/// conditional block.
1414///
1415/// We are looking for code like the following:
1416/// BrBB:
1417/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1418/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1419/// ... // function).
1420/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1421/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1422/// ThenBB:
1423/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1424/// br label EndBB
1425/// EndBB:
1426/// ...
1427/// We are going to transform this into:
1428/// BrBB:
1429/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1430/// ... //
1431/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1432/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1433/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1434/// ...
1435///
1436/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1437/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001438static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1439 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001440 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1441 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001442 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001443
1444 // Volatile or atomic.
1445 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001446 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001447
1448 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1449
1450 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001451 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001452 for (BasicBlock::reverse_iterator RI = BrBB->rbegin(),
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001453 RE = BrBB->rend(); RI != RE && MaxNumInstToLookAt; ++RI) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001454 Instruction *CurI = &*RI;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001455 // Skip debug info.
1456 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CurI))
1457 continue;
1458 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001459
1460 // Could be calling an instruction that effects memory like free().
1461 if (CurI->mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001462 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001463
1464 StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(CurI);
1465 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1466 if (SI && SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1467 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1468 return SI->getValueOperand();
1469 else if (SI)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001470 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001471 }
1472
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001473 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001474}
1475
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001476/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001477///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001478/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1479/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1480/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1481/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1482/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1483///
1484/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1485/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1486/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1487/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1488///
1489///
1490/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1491/// \code
1492/// BB:
1493/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1494/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1495/// ThenBB:
1496/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001497/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001498/// EndBB:
1499/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1500/// ...
1501/// \endcode
1502///
1503/// Into this IR:
1504/// \code
1505/// BB:
1506/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1507/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1508/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1509/// ...
1510/// \endcode
1511///
1512/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001513static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001514 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001515 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1516 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1517 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1518 return false;
1519
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001520 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1521 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1522
1523 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1524 // to swap the select operands later.
1525 bool Invert = false;
1526 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1527 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1528 Invert = true;
1529 }
1530 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1531
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001532 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1533 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1534 // - They are defined in BB, and
1535 // - They have no side effects, and
1536 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1537 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1538
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001539 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001540 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1541 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001542 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001543 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001544 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001545 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001546 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001547 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1548 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001549
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001550 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001551 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001552 ++SpeculationCost;
1553 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001554 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001555
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001556 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001557 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1558 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1559 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001560 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001561 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001562 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1563 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001564 return false;
1565
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001566 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1567 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1568 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1569
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001570 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001571 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001572 // being sunk into the use block.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001573 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001574 i != e; ++i) {
1575 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001576 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB ||
1577 OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
1578 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1579
1580 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001581 }
1582 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001583
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001584 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1585 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1586 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
1587 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator I =
1588 SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(), E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
1589 I != E; ++I)
1590 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001591 ++SpeculationCost;
1592 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001593 return false;
1594 }
1595
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001596 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
1597 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001598 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001599 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001600 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
1601 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001602
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001603 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001604 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001605 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001606 continue;
1607
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001608 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
1609 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, PN) ||
1610 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, PN))
1611 return false;
1612
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001613 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001614 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
1615 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
1616 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001617 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
1618
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001619 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
1620 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001621 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001622 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
1623 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001624 unsigned MaxCost = 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold *
1625 TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
1626 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001627 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001628
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00001629 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
1630 // getting expanded into Instructions.
1631 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001632 // constant expression.
1633 ++SpeculationCost;
1634 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001635 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001636 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001637
1638 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
1639 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001640 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001641 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001642
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001643 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001644 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001645
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001646 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
1647 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001648 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001649 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
1650 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
1651 if (Invert)
1652 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00001653 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
1654 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001655 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
1656 }
1657
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00001658 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
1659 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
1660 for (auto &I: *ThenBB)
1661 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
1662
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001663 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001664 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
1665 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001666
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001667 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001668 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001669 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
1670 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
1671 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
1672 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
1673 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
1674 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
1675
1676 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
1677 if (OrigV == ThenV)
1678 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001679
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001680 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001681 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
1682 // destinations were inverted.
1683 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001684 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001685 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00001686 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
1687 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001688 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
1689 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001690 }
1691
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001692 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001693 return true;
1694}
1695
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001696/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001697static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
1698 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001699 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001700
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00001701 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001702 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
1703 continue;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001704 if (Size > 10) return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001705 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001706
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001707 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001708 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001709 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
1710 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
1711 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI)) return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001712 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001713
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001714 // Looks ok, continue checking.
1715 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001716
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001717 return true;
1718}
1719
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001720/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
1721/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
1722/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001723static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001724 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1725 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00001726 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
1727 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001728 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
1729 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001730
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001731 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
1732 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00001733 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001734 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001735 }
1736
1737 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001738 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001739
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00001740 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
1741 if (llvm::any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
1742 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
1743 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
1744 }))
1745 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001746
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001747 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
1748 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001749 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001750 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001751 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1)) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001752
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001753 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
1754 // branch to RealDest.
1755 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
1756 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001757
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001758 if (RealDest == BB) continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001759 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
1760 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator())) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001761
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001762 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
1763 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
1764 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
1765 // the edge we are about to create.
1766 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
1767 RealDest->getName()+".critedge",
1768 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
1769 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001770
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00001771 // Update PHI nodes.
1772 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001773
1774 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
1775 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
1776 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
1777 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
1778 DenseMap<Value*, Value*> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
1779 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
1780 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
1781 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
1782 continue;
1783 }
1784 // Clone the instruction.
1785 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
1786 if (BBI->hasName()) N->setName(BBI->getName()+".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001787
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001788 // Update operands due to translation.
1789 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end();
1790 i != e; ++i) {
1791 DenseMap<Value*, Value*>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
1792 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
1793 *i = PI->second;
1794 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001795
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001796 // Check for trivial simplification.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001797 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, DL)) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001798 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001799 delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001800 } else {
1801 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
1802 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
1803 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001804 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001805 }
1806 }
1807
1808 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
1809 // to EdgeBB instead.
1810 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
1811 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1812 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
1813 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
1814 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
1815 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001816
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001817 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001818 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001819 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001820
1821 return false;
1822}
1823
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001824/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
1825/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001826static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
1827 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001828 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
1829 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
1830 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
1831 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
1832 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
1833 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001834 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
1835 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
1836 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001837 if (!IfCond ||
1838 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
1839 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
1840 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001841
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00001842 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
1843 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
1844 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
1845 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
1846 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
1847 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
1848 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
1849 if (NumPhis > 2)
1850 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001851
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001852 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
1853 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
1854 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001855 SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00001856 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
1857 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001858 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
1859 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001860
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001861 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
1862 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001863 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001864 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001865 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001866 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001867 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001868
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001869 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001870 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001871 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001872 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001873 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001874 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001875
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00001876 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001877 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
1878 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001879 if (!PN) return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001880
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001881 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
1882 // often be turned into switches and other things.
1883 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
1884 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
1885 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
1886 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
1887 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001888
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00001889 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
1890 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
1891 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
1892 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001893 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001894 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
1895 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
1896 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001897 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001898 } else {
1899 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
1900 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin();!isa<TerminatorInst>(I);++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001901 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001902 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00001903 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
1904 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001905 return false;
1906 }
1907 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001908
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001909 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001910 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001911 } else {
1912 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
1913 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin();!isa<TerminatorInst>(I);++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001914 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001915 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00001916 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
1917 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001918 return false;
1919 }
1920 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001921
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00001922 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001923 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001924
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001925 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
1926 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001927 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001928 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001929
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001930 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
1931 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001932 if (IfBlock1)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001933 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001934 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001935 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001936 if (IfBlock2)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001937 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001938 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001939 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001940
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001941 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
1942 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001943 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
1944 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001945
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00001946 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
1947 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
1948 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001949 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001950 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001951
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001952 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
1953 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
1954 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
1955 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00001956 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
1957 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001958 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001959 return true;
1960}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001961
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001962/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
1963/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001964/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001965static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001966 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001967 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
1968 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
1969 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
1970 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
1971 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001972
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001973 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
1974 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
1975 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001976 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00001977 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001978 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00001979 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001980
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001981 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001982 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
1983 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
1984 // branch into a return.
1985 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
1986 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
1987 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001988 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001989 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001990 return true;
1991 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001992
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001993 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
1994 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
1995 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
1996 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001997
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001998 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
1999 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2000 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2001 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2002 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2003 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2004 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002005
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002006 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2007 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2008 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2009 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2010 // safe.
2011 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2012 if (TCV->canTrap())
2013 return false;
2014 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2015 if (FCV->canTrap())
2016 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002017
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002018 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2019 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2020 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2021 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002022
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002023 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2024 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002025 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002026 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002027 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2028 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2029 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2030 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002031 TrueValue =
2032 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002033 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002034 }
2035
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002036 Value *RI = !TrueValue ?
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002037 Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
2038
Daniel Dunbar5e0a58b2009-08-23 10:29:55 +00002039 (void) RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002040
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002041 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002042 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
2043 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: "<< *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002044
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002045 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2046
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002047 return true;
2048}
2049
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002050/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002051/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002052static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002053 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2054 return false;
2055 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = PB->begin(), E = PB->end(); I != E; I++) {
2056 Instruction *PBI = &*I;
2057 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2058 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2059 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2060 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2061 return true;
2062 }
2063 }
2064 return false;
2065}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002066
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002067/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2068/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2069/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002070bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002071 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002072
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002073 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002074 if (BI->isConditional())
2075 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2076 else {
2077 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2078 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
2079 // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its
2080 // predecessor.
2081 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2082 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2083 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2084 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2085 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
2086 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end();
2087 I != E; ) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002088 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002089 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2090 Cond = Curr;
2091 break;
2092 }
2093 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2094 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2095 return false;
2096 }
2097 }
2098
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002099 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002100 return false;
2101 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002102
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002103 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2104 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002105 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002106
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002107 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002108 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002109
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002110 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002111 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt)) ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002112
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002113 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002114 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002115
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002116 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2117 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2118 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2119 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2120 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2121 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002122 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002123 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2124 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2125 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002126 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002127 return false;
2128 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2129 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2130 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2131 return false;
2132 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2133 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2134 // and Cond.
2135 ++NumBonusInsts;
2136 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2137 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2138 return false;
2139 }
2140
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002141 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2142 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2143 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2144 if (CE->canTrap())
2145 return false;
2146 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2147 if (CE->canTrap())
2148 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002149
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002150 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
2151 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002152 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002153 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2154 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002155
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002156 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2157 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002158 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002159
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002160 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2161 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2162 // blocks.
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002163 SmallVector<PHINode*, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002164 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002165 (BI->isConditional() &&
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002166 !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
2167 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2168 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002169 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002170
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002171 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002172 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002173 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002174
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002175 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002176 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002177 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002178 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002179 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002180 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2181 Opc = Instruction::And;
2182 InvertPredCond = true;
2183 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2184 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2185 InvertPredCond = true;
2186 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002187 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002188 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002189 } else {
2190 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2191 continue;
2192 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002193
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002194 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002195 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002196
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002197 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2198 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002199 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002200
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002201 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2202 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2203 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2204 } else {
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002205 NewCond = Builder.CreateNot(NewCond,
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002206 PBI->getCondition()->getName()+".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002207 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002208
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002209 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002210 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002211 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002212
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002213 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002214 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002215 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2216 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2217 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002218 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002219 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002220 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002221 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2222 continue;
2223 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2224 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002225 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002226 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002227
2228 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2229 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2230 // only given the branch precondition.
2231 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2232 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002233 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002234
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002235 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2236 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002237 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002238 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002239
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002240 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2241 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002242 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002243 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002244 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002245 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), New);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002246 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002247 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002248
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002249 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002250 Instruction *NewCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002251 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(),
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002252 New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002253 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2254
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002255 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Sanjay Pateldc88bd62016-04-23 20:01:22 +00002256 bool PredHasWeights =
2257 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2258 bool SuccHasWeights =
2259 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002260 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2261
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002262 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002263 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2264 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2265 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
2266 //TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
2267 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2268 //FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
2269 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2270 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2271 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
2272 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * (SuccFalseWeight +
2273 SuccTrueWeight) + PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2274 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002275 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2276 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2277 }
2278 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002279 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2280 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2281 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
2282 //TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
2283 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
2284 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * (SuccFalseWeight +
2285 SuccTrueWeight) + PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2286 //FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2287 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2288 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002289 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2290 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2291 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002292 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2293 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2294 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2295
2296 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),NewWeights.end());
2297 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2298 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).
2299 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
2300 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002301 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002302 } else {
2303 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2304 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002305 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002306 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
2307 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002308 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002309 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2310 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2311 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2312 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
2313 Instruction *NotCond =
2314 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(),
2315 "not.cond"));
2316 MergedCond =
2317 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And,
2318 NotCond, New,
2319 "and.cond"));
2320 if (PBI_C->isOne())
2321 MergedCond =
2322 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::Or,
2323 PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond,
2324 "or.cond"));
2325 } else {
2326 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2327 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2328 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002329 MergedCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002330 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And,
2331 PBI->getCondition(), New,
2332 "and.cond"));
2333 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
2334 Instruction *NotCond =
2335 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(),
2336 "not.cond"));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002337 MergedCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002338 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::Or,
2339 NotCond, MergedCond,
2340 "or.cond"));
2341 }
2342 }
2343 // Update PHI Node.
2344 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2345 MergedCond);
2346 }
2347 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2348 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2349 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2350 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002351 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002352
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002353 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2354 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2355
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002356 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
2357 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E; ++I)
2358 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(*I))
2359 I->clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002360
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002361 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002362 }
2363 return false;
2364}
2365
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002366// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2367// nullptr.
2368static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2369 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2370 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2371 if (!BB)
2372 continue;
2373 for (auto &I : *BB)
2374 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2375 if (S)
2376 // Multiple stores seen.
2377 return nullptr;
2378 else
2379 S = SI;
2380 }
2381 }
2382 return S;
2383}
2384
2385static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2386 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2387 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2388 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2389 //
2390 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2391 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2392 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2393 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2394 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2395 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2396 // one.
2397 //
2398 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2399 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2400 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2401 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2402 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
2403
2404 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2405 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2406 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2407 if (!AlternativeV)
2408 break;
2409
2410 assert(std::distance(pred_begin(Succ), pred_end(Succ)) == 2);
2411 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2412 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2413 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2414 break;
2415 PHI = nullptr;
2416 }
2417 if (PHI)
2418 return PHI;
2419
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002420 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2421 if (!AlternativeV &&
2422 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2423 return V;
2424
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002425 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002426 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2427 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2428 if (PredBB != BB)
2429 PHI->addIncoming(AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()),
2430 PredBB);
2431 return PHI;
2432}
2433
2434static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2435 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2436 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
2437 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond) {
2438 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2439 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2440 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2441 };
2442
2443 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2444 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2445 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2446 if (!BB)
2447 return true;
2448 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2449 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2450 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002451 unsigned N = 0;
2452 for (auto &I : *BB) {
2453 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2454 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2455 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2456 ++N;
2457 // Free instructions.
2458 else if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) ||
2459 IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
2460 continue;
2461 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002462 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002463 }
2464 return N <= PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002465 };
2466
2467 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively && (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) ||
2468 !IsWorthwhile(PFB) ||
2469 !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2470 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
2471 return false;
2472
2473 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2474 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2475 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2476 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2477 // testing.
2478 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2479 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2480 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2481 return false;
2482
2483 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2484 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2485 return false;
2486
2487 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2488 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2489 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2490 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2491 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2492 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2493 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2494 //
2495 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2496 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2497 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2498 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2499 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2500 return false;
2501 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2502 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2503 return false;
2504 if (QTB)
2505 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2506 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2507 return false;
2508 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2509 I != E; ++I)
2510 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2511 return false;
2512
2513 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
2514 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
2515 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2516 ->getCondition();
2517 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2518 ->getCondition();
2519
2520 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
2521 PStore->getParent());
2522 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
2523 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
2524
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002525 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
2526
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002527 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
2528 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
2529
2530 if (InvertPCond)
2531 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
2532 if (InvertQCond)
2533 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
2534 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
2535
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002536 auto *T =
2537 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002538 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
2539 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
2540 AAMDNodes AAMD;
2541 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
2542 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
2543 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
2544
2545 QStore->eraseFromParent();
2546 PStore->eraseFromParent();
2547
2548 return true;
2549}
2550
2551static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI) {
2552 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
2553 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
2554 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
2555 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
2556 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
2557 // PBI and QBI.
2558 //
2559 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
2560 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
2561 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
2562 // sequences can be if-converted away.
2563 //
2564 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
2565 //
2566 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
2567 // / \ | \
2568 // PTB PFB | PFB
2569 // \ / | /
2570 // QBI QBI
2571 // / \ | \
2572 // QTB QFB | QFB
2573 // \ / | /
2574 // PostBB PostBB
2575 //
2576 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
2577 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
2578 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
2579 //
2580 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
2581 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
2582 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
2583 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
2584 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
2585
2586 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
2587 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
2588 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
2589 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
2590 InvertPCond = true;
2591 }
2592 if (QFB == PostBB) {
2593 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
2594 InvertQCond = true;
2595 }
2596
2597 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
2598 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
2599 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
2600 PTB = nullptr;
2601 if (QTB == PostBB)
2602 QTB = nullptr;
2603
2604 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
2605 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
2606 // predecessor.
2607 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
2608 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P &&
2609 BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
2610 };
2611 if (!PostBB ||
2612 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
2613 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
2614 return false;
2615 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
2616 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
2617 return false;
2618 if (PostBB->getNumUses() != 2 || QBI->getParent()->getNumUses() != 2)
2619 return false;
2620
2621 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
2622 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
2623 SmallPtrSet<Value *,4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
2624 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
2625 if (!BB)
2626 continue;
2627 for (auto &I : *BB)
2628 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
2629 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
2630 }
2631 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
2632 if (!BB)
2633 continue;
2634 for (auto &I : *BB)
2635 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
2636 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
2637 }
2638
2639 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
2640 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
2641 // clear what it contains.
2642 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
2643
2644 bool Changed = false;
2645 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
2646 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
2647 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond);
2648 return Changed;
2649}
2650
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002651/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
2652/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002653/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
2654/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00002655static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2656 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002657 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
2658 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00002659
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002660 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002661 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002662 // this conditional branch redundant.
2663 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2664 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2665 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
2666 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
2667 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
2668 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
2669 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002670 BI->setCondition(ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002671 CondIsTrue));
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002672 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
2673 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002674
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002675 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
2676 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
2677 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
2678 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002679 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002680 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
2681 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
2682 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00002683 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
2684 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
2685 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002686 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002687 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
2688 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002689 PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional() &&
2690 PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2691 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2692 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002693 NewPN->addIncoming(ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002694 CondIsTrue), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002695 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002696 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002697 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002698 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002699
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002700 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002701 return true;
2702 }
2703 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002704
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00002705 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
2706 if (CE->canTrap())
2707 return false;
2708
Philip Reames846e3e42015-10-29 03:11:49 +00002709 // If BI is reached from the true path of PBI and PBI's condition implies
2710 // BI's condition, we know the direction of the BI branch.
Chad Rosiere2cbd132016-04-25 17:23:36 +00002711 if ((PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getParent() ||
2712 PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getParent()) &&
Philip Reames846e3e42015-10-29 03:11:49 +00002713 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1) &&
2714 BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chad Rosiere2cbd132016-04-25 17:23:36 +00002715 bool FalseDest = PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getParent();
2716 Optional<bool> Implication = isImpliedCondition(
2717 PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL, FalseDest);
Chad Rosier41dd31f2016-04-20 19:15:26 +00002718 if (Implication) {
2719 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
2720 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
2721 ConstantInt *CI = *Implication ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
2722 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
2723 BI->setCondition(CI);
2724 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
2725 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
2726 }
Philip Reames846e3e42015-10-29 03:11:49 +00002727 }
2728
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002729 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
2730 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
2731 // merged store at the end.
2732 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
2733 return true;
2734
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002735 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002736 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002737 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00002738 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
2739 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2740 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2741 ++BBI;
2742 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002743 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00002744
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002745 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002746 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
2747 PBIOp = 0;
2748 BIOp = 0;
2749 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2750 PBIOp = 0;
2751 BIOp = 1;
2752 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
2753 PBIOp = 1;
2754 BIOp = 0;
2755 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2756 PBIOp = 1;
2757 BIOp = 1;
2758 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002759 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002760 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002761
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002762 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
2763 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
2764 // keep getting unwound.
2765 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
2766 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002767
2768 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002769 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
2770 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002771
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002772 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
2773 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
2774 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
2775
2776 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002777 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2778 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002779 isa<PHINode>(II); ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002780 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
2781 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002782
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002783 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
2784 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2785 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
2786 if (CE->canTrap())
2787 return false;
2788
2789 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2790 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2791 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
2792 if (CE->canTrap())
2793 return false;
2794 }
2795
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002796 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002797 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002798
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002799 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002800 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002801
2802
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002803 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
2804 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
2805 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
2806 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
2807 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
2808 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
2809 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
2810 if (OtherDest == BB) {
2811 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
2812 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002813 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
2814 "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002815 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
2816 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002817 }
2818
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002819 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002820
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002821 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
2822 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002823
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002824 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
2825 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002826 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002827 if (PBIOp)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002828 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName()+".not");
2829
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002830 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
2831 if (BIOp)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002832 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName()+".not");
2833
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002834 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002835 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002836
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002837 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
2838 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
2839 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
2840 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002841
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002842 // Update branch weight for PBI.
2843 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Sanjay Pateldc88bd62016-04-23 20:01:22 +00002844 bool PredHasWeights =
2845 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2846 bool SuccHasWeights =
2847 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002848 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2849 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
2850 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ?PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
2851 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
2852 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
2853 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
2854 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
2855 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00002856 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
2857 PredOther * SuccCommon,
2858 PredOther * SuccOther};
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002859 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2860 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2861
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002862 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00002863 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
2864 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002865 }
2866
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002867 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
2868 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002869 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002870
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002871 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
2872 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
2873 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
2874 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002875 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002876 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
2877 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
2878 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2879 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2880 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2881 if (BIV != PBIV) {
2882 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002883 Value *NV = cast<SelectInst>
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002884 (Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002885 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002886 }
2887 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002888
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002889 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
2890 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002891
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002892 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
2893 // one fewer predecessor.
2894 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002895}
2896
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002897// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
2898// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002899// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
2900// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
2901// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
2902static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002903 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
2904 uint32_t TrueWeight,
2905 uint32_t FalseWeight){
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002906 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
2907 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
2908 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
2909 // successor.
2910 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002911 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002912
2913 // Then remove the rest.
Pete Cooperebcd7482015-08-06 20:22:46 +00002914 for (BasicBlock *Succ : OldTerm->successors()) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002915 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
2916 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002917 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002918 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002919 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002920 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00002921 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
2922 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002923 }
2924
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002925 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
2926 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
2927
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002928 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002929 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002930 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
2931 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
2932 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002933 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002934 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002935 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
2936 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002937 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
2938 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
2939 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2940 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext()).
2941 createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
2942 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002943 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
2944 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
2945 // terminator must be unreachable.
2946 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
2947 } else {
2948 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
2949 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
2950 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002951 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002952 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002953 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002954 else
2955 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002956 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002957 }
2958
2959 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
2960 return true;
2961}
2962
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002963// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002964// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
2965// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
2966// unconditional otherwise.
2967static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
2968 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
2969 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
2970 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
2971 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
2972 return false;
2973
2974 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
2975 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00002976 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor();
2977 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002978
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002979 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
2980 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
2981 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
2982 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
2983 if (HasWeights) {
2984 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
2985 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
2986 TrueWeight = (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).
2987 getSuccessorIndex()];
2988 FalseWeight = (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).
2989 getSuccessorIndex()];
2990 }
2991 }
2992
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002993 // Perform the actual simplification.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002994 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB,
2995 TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002996}
2997
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002998// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00002999// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3000// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3001// with
3002// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3003static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3004 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3005 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3006 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3007 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3008 return false;
3009
3010 // Extract the actual blocks.
3011 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3012 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3013
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003014 // Perform the actual simplification.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003015 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB,
3016 0, 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003017}
3018
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003019/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3020/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003021/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3022/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3023/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3024/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3025/// like:
3026///
3027/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3028/// DEFAULT:
3029/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3030/// br label %end
3031/// end:
3032/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003033///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003034/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3035/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003036static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003037 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
3038 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
3039 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003040 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003041
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003042 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3043 // complex.
3044 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse()) return false;
3045
3046 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3047 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003048
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003049 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3050 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3051 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3052 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003053 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator())) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003054
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003055 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3056 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3057 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003058
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003059 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3060 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3061 // away.
3062 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3063 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3064 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3065 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003066
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003067 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003068 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003069 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3070 }
3071 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003072 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003073 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003074
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003075 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3076 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3077 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003078 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003079 Value *V;
3080 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3081 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3082 else
3083 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003084
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003085 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3086 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3087 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003088 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003089 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003090
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003091 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3092 // the block.
3093 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003094 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003095 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003096 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3097 return false;
3098
3099 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3100 // true in the PHI.
3101 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
3102 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3103
3104 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3105 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3106
3107 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3108 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3109 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3110 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3111
3112 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3113 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
3114 BasicBlock *NewBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge",
3115 BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003116 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3117 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3118 if (HasWeights) {
3119 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3120 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3121 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
3122 Weights[0] = (Weights[0]+1) >> 1;
3123 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3124
3125 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
3126 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3127 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).
3128 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
3129 }
3130 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003131 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003132
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003133 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003134 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3135 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3136 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003137 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3138 return true;
3139}
3140
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003141/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003142/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3143/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003144static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3145 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003146 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003147 if (!Cond) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003148
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003149 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3150 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3151 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003152
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003153 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003154 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3155 // Unpack the result
3156 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt*> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
3157 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3158 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3159 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003160
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003161 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003162 if (!CompVal) return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003163
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003164 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3165 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3166 return false;
3167
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003168 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3169
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003170 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3171 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3172 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3173 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003174
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003175 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003176 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003177 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003178
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003179 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3180 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3181
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003182 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3183 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
3184 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3185 if (!TrueWhenEqual) std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003186
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003187 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003188
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003189 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003190 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n" << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003191
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003192 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3193 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3194 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3195 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003196 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3197 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003198 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3199 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003200 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3201
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003202 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003203 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003204 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003205 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003206
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003207 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003208
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003209 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3210 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003211 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003212
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003213 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
3214 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003215 BB = NewBB;
3216 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003217
3218 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003219 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3220 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003221 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3222 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003223 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003224
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003225 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003226 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003227
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003228 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3229 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3230 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003231
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003232 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3233 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3234 // the number of edges added.
3235 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin();
3236 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
3237 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3238 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3239 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size()-1; i != e; ++i)
3240 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3241 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003242
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003243 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3244 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003245
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003246 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003247 return true;
3248}
3249
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003250bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003251 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3252 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3253 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3254 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3255 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3256 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003257
3258 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003259}
3260
3261// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3262bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3263 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3264
3265 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3266 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3267 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
3268 E = RI->getIterator();
3269 while (++I != E)
3270 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3271 return false;
3272
3273 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
3274 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3275
3276 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
3277 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues();
3278 Idx != End; Idx++) {
3279 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3280 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3281
3282 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3283 // it has other dependents.
3284 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3285 continue;
3286
3287 auto *LandingPad =
3288 dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
3289 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3290 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3291 continue;
3292
3293 bool isTrivial = true;
3294
3295 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3296 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3297 while (++I != E)
3298 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3299 isTrivial = false;
3300 break;
3301 }
3302
3303 if (isTrivial)
3304 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3305 }
3306
3307 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
3308 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty()) return false;
3309
3310 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3311 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3312 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3313 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3314 // to remove them all.
3315 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3316 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3317
3318 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3319 PI != PE;) {
3320 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3321 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3322 }
3323
3324 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3325 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3326 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3327 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3328 // predecessors.
3329 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3330 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3331 }
3332
3333 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3334 if (pred_empty(BB))
3335 BB->eraseFromParent();
3336
3337 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3338}
3339
3340// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3341bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003342 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3343 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003344 assert (RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3345 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003346
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003347 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3348 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003349 while (++I != E)
3350 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3351 return false;
3352
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003353 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003354 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3355 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3356 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003357 }
3358
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003359 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3360 BB->eraseFromParent();
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00003361 if (LoopHeaders) LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003362 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003363}
3364
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003365static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003366 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3367 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3368 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3369 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3370 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3371 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3372 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3373 // simplified.
3374 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003375 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3376 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003377 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3378 return false;
3379
3380 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003381 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003382 while (++I != E)
3383 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3384 return false;
3385
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003386 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3387 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003388 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003389 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003390
3391 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3392 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3393 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3394 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3395 // are both EH pads).
3396 if (UnwindDest) {
3397 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3398 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003399 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003400 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003401 I != IE; ++I) {
3402 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003403
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003404 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003405 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003406 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003407 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3408 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3409 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3410 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3411 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3412 // pad being removed.
3413 //
3414 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3415 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3416 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3417 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3418 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3419 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3420
3421 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3422 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3423
3424 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3425 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3426 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3427 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003428 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003429 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
3430 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3431 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3432 }
3433 } else {
3434 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3435 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3436 // predecessors with this value.
3437 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3438 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3439 }
3440 }
3441 }
3442
3443 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003444 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003445 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3446 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003447 I != IE;) {
3448 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3449 // being moved to another block.
3450 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3451 if (PN->use_empty())
3452 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3453 // when we erase BB below.
3454 continue;
3455
3456 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3457 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3458 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3459 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3460 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3461 if (pred != BB)
3462 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3463 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3464 }
3465 }
3466
3467 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3468 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3469 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003470 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003471 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003472 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003473 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003474 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003475 }
3476 }
3477
3478 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3479 BB->eraseFromParent();
3480 return true;
3481}
3482
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003483// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
3484static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
3485 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
3486 // with.
3487 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
3488 if (!UnwindDest)
3489 return false;
3490
3491 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
3492 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
3493 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
3494 return false;
3495
3496 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
3497 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
3498 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
3499 return false;
3500
3501 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
3502 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
3503 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
3504 // funclet bundle operands.
3505 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
3506 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
3507 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
3508 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
3509 // destination.
3510 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
3511 RI->eraseFromParent();
3512
3513 return true;
3514}
3515
3516bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00003517 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
3518 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
3519 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
3520 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
3521 return false;
3522
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003523 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
3524 return true;
3525
3526 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
3527 return true;
3528
3529 return false;
3530}
3531
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003532bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003533 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3534 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator()) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003535
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003536 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
3537 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
3538 SmallVector<BranchInst*, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00003539 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
3540 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003541 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
3542 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
3543 if (BI->isUnconditional())
3544 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
3545 else
3546 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
3547 }
3548 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003549
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003550 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003551 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003552 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3553 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
3554 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
3555 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003556 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003557 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003558
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003559 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00003560 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003561 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3562 BB->eraseFromParent();
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00003563 if (LoopHeaders) LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
3564 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003565
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003566 return true;
3567 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003568
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003569 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
3570 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
3571 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
3572 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3573 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003574
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003575 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
3576 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
3577 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003578 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003579 return true;
3580 }
3581 return false;
3582}
3583
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003584bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
3585 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003586
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003587 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003588
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003589 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
3590 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003591 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
3592 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003593 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003594 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
3595 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
3596 // operations may have this effect.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003597 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003598
3599 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003600 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003601 if (SI->isVolatile())
3602 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003603 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003604 if (LI->isVolatile())
3605 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003606 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003607 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
3608 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003609 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003610 if (CXI->isVolatile())
3611 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003612 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
3613 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
3614 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
3615 // default.
3616 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
3617 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
3618 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
3619 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003620 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
3621 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003622 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003623 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00003624 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
3625 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
3626 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
3627 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003628 }
3629
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00003630 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
3631 if (!BBI->use_empty())
3632 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003633 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003634 Changed = true;
3635 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003636
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003637 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
3638 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
3639 if (&BB->front() != UI) return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003640
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003641 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
3642 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
3643 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003644 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003645 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003646 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
3647 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
3648 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3649 TI->eraseFromParent();
3650 Changed = true;
3651 }
3652 } else {
3653 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003654 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003655 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3656 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003657 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003658 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3659 Changed = true;
3660 }
3661 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003662 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003663 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003664 i != e; ++i)
3665 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003666 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
3667 SI->removeCase(i);
3668 --i; --e;
3669 Changed = true;
3670 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003671 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
3672 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
3673 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
3674 Changed = true;
3675 }
3676 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
3677 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
3678 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
3679 Changed = true;
3680 continue;
3681 }
3682
3683 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
3684 E = CSI->handler_end();
3685 I != E; ++I) {
3686 if (*I == BB) {
3687 CSI->removeHandler(I);
3688 --I;
3689 --E;
3690 Changed = true;
3691 }
3692 }
3693 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
3694 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
3695 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
3696 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
3697 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
3698 } else {
3699 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
3700 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
3701 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
3702 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
3703 }
3704 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
3705 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
3706 CSI->eraseFromParent();
3707 Changed = true;
3708 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003709 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003710 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3711 TI->eraseFromParent();
3712 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003713 }
3714 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003715
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003716 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Ramkumar Ramachandra40c3e032015-01-13 03:46:47 +00003717 if (pred_empty(BB) &&
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003718 BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
3719 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3720 BB->eraseFromParent();
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00003721 if (LoopHeaders) LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003722 return true;
3723 }
3724
3725 return Changed;
3726}
3727
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003728static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
3729 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
3730
3731 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3732 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3733 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
3734 return false;
3735 }
3736 return true;
3737}
3738
3739/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
3740/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00003741static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003742 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003743
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003744 bool HasDefault =
3745 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003746
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003747 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
3748 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
3749 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
3750 SmallVector <ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
3751 SmallVector <ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
3752
3753 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I : SI->cases()) {
3754 BasicBlock *Dest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
3755 if (!DestA) DestA = Dest;
3756 if (Dest == DestA) {
3757 CasesA.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3758 continue;
3759 }
3760 if (!DestB) DestB = Dest;
3761 if (Dest == DestB) {
3762 CasesB.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3763 continue;
3764 }
3765 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003766 }
3767
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003768 assert(DestA && DestB && "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
3769 assert(DestA != DestB);
3770 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
3771 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
3772 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
3773
3774 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
3775 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
3776 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
3777 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
3778 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
3779 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
3780 ContiguousDest = DestA;
3781 OtherDest = DestB;
3782 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
3783 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
3784 ContiguousDest = DestB;
3785 OtherDest = DestA;
3786 } else
3787 return false;
3788
3789 // Start building the compare and branch.
3790
3791 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
3792 Constant *NumCases = ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003793
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003794 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
3795 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003796 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
3797
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00003798 Value *Cmp;
3799 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003800 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00003801 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
3802 else
3803 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003804 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003805
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003806 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003807 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
3808 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003809 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3810 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003811 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
3812 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
3813 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3814 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
3815 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
3816 else
3817 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
3818 }
3819 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
3820 TrueWeight /= 2;
3821 FalseWeight /= 2;
3822 }
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003823 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003824 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(
3825 (uint32_t)TrueWeight, (uint32_t)FalseWeight));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003826 }
3827 }
3828
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003829 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
3830 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
3831 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
3832 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest()) ++PreviousEdges;
3833 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003834 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
3835 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003836 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
3837 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
3838 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest()) ++PreviousEdges;
3839 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
3840 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
3841 }
3842
3843 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003844 SI->eraseFromParent();
3845
3846 return true;
3847}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003848
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003849/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003850/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003851static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
3852 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003853 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00003854 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003855 APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0);
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00003856 computeKnownBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003857
3858 // Gather dead cases.
3859 SmallVector<ConstantInt*, 8> DeadCases;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003860 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003861 if ((I.getCaseValue()->getValue() & KnownZero) != 0 ||
3862 (I.getCaseValue()->getValue() & KnownOne) != KnownOne) {
3863 DeadCases.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003864 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case '"
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003865 << I.getCaseValue() << "' is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003866 }
3867 }
3868
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00003869 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00003870 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
3871 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
3872 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00003873 bool HasDefault =
3874 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00003875 const unsigned NumUnknownBits = Bits -
3876 (KnownZero.Or(KnownOne)).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00003877 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00003878 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
3879 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
3880 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00003881 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
3882 BasicBlock *NewDefault = SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(),
3883 SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003884 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
3885 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00003886 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
3887 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
3888 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
3889 return true;
3890 }
3891
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003892 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3893 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3894 if (HasWeight) {
3895 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3896 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
3897 }
3898
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003899 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
3900 for (unsigned I = 0, E = DeadCases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003901 SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCases[I]);
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003902 assert(Case != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003903 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003904 if (HasWeight) {
3905 std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex()+1], Weights.back());
3906 Weights.pop_back();
3907 }
3908
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003909 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003910 Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003911 SI->removeCase(Case);
3912 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00003913 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003914 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
3915 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3916 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).
3917 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
3918 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003919
3920 return !DeadCases.empty();
3921}
3922
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003923/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
3924/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003925/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
3926/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
3927/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
3928static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
3929 BasicBlock *BB,
3930 int *PhiIndex) {
3931 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003932 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003933 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003934 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003935
3936 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
3937 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003938 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003939
3940 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
3941
3942 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
3943 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
3944 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
3945 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
3946
3947 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3948 if (InValue != CaseValue) continue;
3949
3950 *PhiIndex = Idx;
3951 return PHI;
3952 }
3953
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003954 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003955}
3956
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003957/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
3958/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
3959/// blocks of the switch can be folded away.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003960/// Returns true if a change is made.
3961static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
3962 typedef DenseMap<PHINode*, SmallVector<int,4> > ForwardingNodesMap;
3963 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
3964
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003965 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003966 ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue();
3967 BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003968
3969 int PhiIndex;
3970 PHINode *PHI = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest,
3971 &PhiIndex);
3972 if (!PHI) continue;
3973
3974 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
3975 }
3976
3977 bool Changed = false;
3978
3979 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
3980 E = ForwardingNodes.end(); I != E; ++I) {
3981 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003982 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003983
3984 if (Indexes.size() < 2) continue;
3985
3986 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
3987 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
3988 Changed = true;
3989 }
3990
3991 return Changed;
3992}
3993
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003994/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003995/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Hans Wennborg08238ad2012-09-07 08:22:57 +00003996static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00003997 if (C->isThreadDependent())
3998 return false;
3999 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4000 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004001
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004002 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C))
4003 return CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing();
4004
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004005 return isa<ConstantFP>(C) ||
4006 isa<ConstantInt>(C) ||
4007 isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) ||
4008 isa<GlobalValue>(C) ||
4009 isa<UndefValue>(C);
4010}
4011
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004012/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004013/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004014static Constant *LookupConstant(Value *V,
4015 const SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*>& ConstantPool) {
4016 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4017 return C;
4018 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4019}
4020
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004021/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004022/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4023/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004024/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004025static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004026ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4027 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004028 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004029 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4030 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004031 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004032 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4033 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4034 if (A->isNullValue())
4035 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004036 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004037 }
4038
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004039 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4040 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4041 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4042 COps.push_back(A);
4043 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004044 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004045 }
4046
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004047 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004048 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4049 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004050 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004051
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004052 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004053}
4054
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004055/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004056/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004057/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004058/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004059static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004060GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004061 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004062 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
4063 const DataLayout &DL) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004064 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4065 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4066
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004067 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4068 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
4069 SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*> ConstantPool;
4070 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
4071 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
4072 ++I) {
4073 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
4074 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
4075 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1)
4076 return false;
4077 Pred = CaseDest;
4078 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
4079 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
4080 // Skip debug intrinsic.
4081 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004082 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&*I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004083 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004084
4085 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4086 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4087 // no longer dominate all its uses.
4088 for (auto &Use : I->uses()) {
4089 User *User = Use.getUser();
4090 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4091 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4092 continue;
4093 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4094 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4095 continue;
4096 return false;
4097 }
4098
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004099 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&*I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004100 } else {
4101 break;
4102 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004103 }
4104
4105 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4106 if (!*CommonDest)
4107 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4108 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4109 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4110 return false;
4111
4112 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
4113 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
4114 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4115 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
4116 if (Idx == -1)
4117 continue;
4118
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004119 Constant *ConstVal = LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx),
4120 ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004121 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004122 return false;
4123
4124 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
4125 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal))
4126 return false;
4127
4128 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
4129 }
4130
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004131 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004132}
4133
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004134// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
4135// Result.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004136static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
4137 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4138 Constant *Result) {
4139 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4140 if (I.first == Result) {
4141 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
4142 return;
4143 }
4144 }
4145 UniqueResults.push_back(std::make_pair(Result,
4146 SmallVector<ConstantInt*, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
4147}
4148
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004149// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004150// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4151// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4152// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004153static bool InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
4154 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4155 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4156 Constant *&DefaultResult,
4157 const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004158 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4159 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4160
4161 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4162 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4163 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
4164 DL))
4165 return false;
4166
4167 // Only one value per case is permitted
4168 if (Results.size() > 1)
4169 return false;
4170 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4171
4172 // Check the PHI consistency.
4173 if (!PHI)
4174 PHI = Results[0].first;
4175 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4176 return false;
4177 }
4178 // Find the default result value.
4179 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4180 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4181 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
4182 DL);
4183 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4184 // is unreachable.
4185 DefaultResult =
4186 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4187 if ((!DefaultResult &&
4188 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
4189 return false;
4190
4191 return true;
4192}
4193
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004194// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4195// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004196// Example:
4197// switch (a) {
4198// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4199// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4200// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4201// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4202// default:
4203// return 4;
4204// }
4205static Value *
4206ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4207 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4208 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4209 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
4210 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
4211 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4212 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4213 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4214 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4215 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4216 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4217
4218 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4219 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4220 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4221 Value *const ValueCompare =
4222 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4223 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4224 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4225 }
4226 Value *const ValueCompare =
4227 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4228 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first, SelectValue,
4229 "switch.select");
4230 }
4231
4232 return nullptr;
4233}
4234
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004235// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4236// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004237static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4238 Value *SelectValue,
4239 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4240 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4241 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4242 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4243 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4244
4245 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4246
4247 // Remove the switch.
4248 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4249 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4250
4251 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4252 continue;
4253 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4254 }
4255 SI->eraseFromParent();
4256}
4257
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004258/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004259/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4260/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
4261static bool SwitchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004262 AssumptionCache *AC, const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004263 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4264 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4265 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4266 Constant *DefaultResult;
4267 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4268 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004269 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
4270 DL))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004271 return false;
4272 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4273 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4274 return false;
4275 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4276
4277 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
4278 Value *SelectValue = ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(
4279 UniqueResults,
4280 DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
4281 if (SelectValue) {
4282 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4283 return true;
4284 }
4285 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4286 return false;
4287}
4288
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004289namespace {
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004290 /// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004291 class SwitchLookupTable {
4292 public:
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004293 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4294 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004295 SwitchLookupTable(
4296 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4297 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4298 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004299
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004300 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004301 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004302 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004303
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004304 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004305 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004306 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00004307 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004308
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004309 private:
4310 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4311 // different ways.
4312 enum {
4313 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4314 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4315 SingleValueKind,
4316
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004317 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4318 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4319 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4320 LinearMapKind,
4321
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004322 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4323 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4324 // shift and mask operations.
4325 BitMapKind,
4326
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004327 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4328 // instructions from the table.
4329 ArrayKind
4330 } Kind;
4331
4332 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
4333 Constant *SingleValue;
4334
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004335 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
4336 ConstantInt *BitMap;
4337 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
4338
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004339 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
4340 ConstantInt *LinearOffset;
4341 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier;
4342
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004343 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
4344 GlobalVariable *Array;
4345 };
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +00004346}
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004347
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004348SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4349 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4350 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4351 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004352 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004353 LinearOffset(nullptr), LinearMultiplier(nullptr), Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004354 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4355 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004356
4357 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004358 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004359
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004360 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4361
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004362 // Build up the table contents.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004363 SmallVector<Constant*, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
4364 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4365 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4366 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004367 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004368
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004369 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue())
4370 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004371 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4372
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004373 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004374 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004375 }
4376
4377 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004378 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004379 assert(DefaultValue &&
4380 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004381 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004382 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4383 if (!TableContents[I])
4384 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004385 }
4386
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004387 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004388 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004389 }
4390
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004391 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4392 // that single value.
4393 if (SingleValue) {
4394 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4395 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004396 }
4397
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004398 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4399 // table index.
4400 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4401 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4402 APInt PrevVal;
4403 APInt DistToPrev;
4404 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4405 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4406 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4407 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4408 if (!ConstVal) {
4409 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4410 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4411 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4412 break;
4413 }
4414 APInt Val = ConstVal->getValue();
4415 if (I != 0) {
4416 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4417 if (I == 1) {
4418 DistToPrev = Dist;
4419 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4420 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4421 break;
4422 }
4423 }
4424 PrevVal = Val;
4425 }
4426 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
4427 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
4428 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
4429 Kind = LinearMapKind;
4430 ++NumLinearMaps;
4431 return;
4432 }
4433 }
4434
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004435 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004436 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004437 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004438 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
4439 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
4440 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00004441 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
4442 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
4443 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
4444 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
4445 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004446 }
4447 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
4448 BitMapElementTy = IT;
4449 Kind = BitMapKind;
4450 ++NumBitMaps;
4451 return;
4452 }
4453
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004454 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004455 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004456 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
4457
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004458 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/ true,
4459 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage,
4460 Initializer,
4461 "switch.table");
4462 Array->setUnnamedAddr(true);
4463 Kind = ArrayKind;
4464}
4465
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004466Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004467 switch (Kind) {
4468 case SingleValueKind:
4469 return SingleValue;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004470 case LinearMapKind: {
4471 // Derive the result value from the input value.
4472 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
4473 false, "switch.idx.cast");
4474 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
4475 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
4476 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
4477 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
4478 return Result;
4479 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004480 case BitMapKind: {
4481 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
4482 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
4483
4484 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
4485 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
4486 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +00004487 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004488
4489 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
4490 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(ShiftAmt,
4491 ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
4492 "switch.shiftamt");
4493
4494 // Shift down.
4495 Value *DownShifted = Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt,
4496 "switch.downshift");
4497 // Mask off.
4498 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy,
4499 "switch.masked");
4500 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004501 case ArrayKind: {
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004502 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004503 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
4504 uint64_t TableSize = Array->getInitializer()->getType()
4505 ->getArrayNumElements();
4506 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
4507 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(Index,
4508 IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(),
4509 IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
4510 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004511
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004512 Value *GEPIndices[] = { Builder.getInt32(0), Index };
David Blaikieaa41cd52015-04-03 21:33:42 +00004513 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
4514 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004515 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
4516 }
4517 }
4518 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
4519}
4520
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004521bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004522 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00004523 Type *ElementType) {
4524 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004525 if (!IT)
4526 return false;
4527 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
4528 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00004529
4530 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
4531 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX/IT->getBitWidth())
4532 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004533 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004534}
4535
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004536/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
4537/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004538static bool
4539ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
4540 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
4541 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004542 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
4543 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004544
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00004545 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004546 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004547 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
4548 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004549
4550 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004551 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004552
4553 // Saturate this flag to false.
4554 AllTablesFitInRegister = AllTablesFitInRegister &&
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004555 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004556
4557 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
4558 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
4559 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
4560 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004561 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004562 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004563
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00004564 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
4565 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
4566 return true;
4567
4568 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
4569 if (HasIllegalType)
4570 return false;
4571
4572 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
4573 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
4574 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
4575 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004576}
4577
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004578/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
4579/// \code
4580/// if (idx < tablesize)
4581/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
4582/// else
4583/// r = default_value;
4584/// if (r != default_value)
4585/// ...
4586/// \endcode
4587/// Is optimized to:
4588/// \code
4589/// cond = idx < tablesize;
4590/// if (cond)
4591/// r = table[idx];
4592/// else
4593/// r = default_value;
4594/// if (cond)
4595/// ...
4596/// \endcode
4597/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
4598static void reuseTableCompare(User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock,
4599 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch, Constant *DefaultValue,
4600 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*> >& Values) {
4601
4602 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
4603 if (!CmpInst)
4604 return;
4605
4606 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
4607 // threading can do its work afterwards.
4608 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
4609 return;
4610
4611 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
4612 if (!CmpOp1)
4613 return;
4614
4615 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
4616 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
4617 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
4618
4619 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
4620 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
4621 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
4622 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
4623 return;
4624
4625 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
4626 // compare result.
4627 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
4628 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
4629 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
4630 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst)
4631 return;
4632 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
4633 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
4634 }
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00004635
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004636 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
4637 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
4638 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
4639 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
4640 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
4641 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
4642 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
4643 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
4644 return;
4645 }
4646
4647 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
4648 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
4649 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
4650 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4651 } else {
4652 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
4653 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(RangeCmp,
4654 ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
4655 RangeCheckBranch);
4656 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
4657 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4658 }
4659}
4660
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004661/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
4662/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
4663/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004664static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4665 const DataLayout &DL,
4666 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004667 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004668
Hans Wennborgc3c8d952012-11-07 21:35:12 +00004669 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004670 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables())
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004671 return false;
4672
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004673 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
4674 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
4675
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004676 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
4677 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
4678 // string and lookup indices into that.
4679
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00004680 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make them
4681 // faster, so we don't analyze them.
4682 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004683 return false;
4684
4685 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00004686 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004687 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
4688 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
4689 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4690 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4691
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004692 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004693 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*>, 4> ResultListTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004694 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
4695 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Constant*> DefaultResults;
4696 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Type*> ResultTypes;
4697 SmallVector<PHINode*, 4> PHIs;
4698
4699 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
4700 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4701 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
4702 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
4703 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
4704 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
4705
4706 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4707 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode*, Constant*>, 4> ResultsTy;
4708 ResultsTy Results;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004709 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004710 Results, DL))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004711 return false;
4712
4713 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004714 for (const auto &I : Results) {
4715 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4716 Constant *Value = I.second;
4717 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
4718 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
4719 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004720 }
4721 }
4722
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004723 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004724 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004725 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
4726 }
4727
4728 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
4729 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
4730 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
4731 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
4732
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004733 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
4734 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004735 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode*, Constant*>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004736 bool HasDefaultResults = GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(),
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004737 &CommonDest, DefaultResultsList, DL);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004738
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004739 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
4740 if (NeedMask) {
4741 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
4742 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
4743 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004744 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004745 return false;
4746 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004747
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004748 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
4749 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4750 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004751 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004752 }
4753
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004754 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004755 return false;
4756
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004757 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004758 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004759 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(),
4760 "switch.lookup",
4761 CommonDest->getParent(),
4762 CommonDest);
4763
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004764 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004765 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
4766 Value *TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal,
4767 "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004768
4769 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
4770 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004771 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004772 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004773 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
4774 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
4775 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
4776
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00004777 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
4778 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
4779 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
4780 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
4781 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4782 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004783 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
4784
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00004785 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004786 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00004787 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
4788 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004789 } else {
4790 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004791 MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004792 RangeCheckBranch = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004793 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004794
4795 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
4796 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004797
4798 if (NeedMask) {
4799 // Before doing the lookup we do the hole check.
4800 // The LookupBB is therefore re-purposed to do the hole check
4801 // and we create a new LookupBB.
4802 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
4803 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
4804 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(),
4805 "switch.lookup",
4806 CommonDest->getParent(),
4807 CommonDest);
4808
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00004809 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
4810 // unnecessary illegal types.
4811 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
4812 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
4813 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004814 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004815 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
4816 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4817 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() -
4818 MinCaseVal->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
4819 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
4820 }
4821 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
4822
4823 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
4824 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
4825 // else continue with table lookup.
4826 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
4827 Value *MaskIndex = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy,
4828 "switch.maskindex");
4829 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex,
4830 "switch.shifted");
4831 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(Shifted,
4832 Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()),
4833 "switch.lobit");
4834 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
4835
4836 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
4837 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
4838 }
4839
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00004840 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
4841 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs, to avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
4842 // do not delete PHINodes here.
4843 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
4844 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
4845 }
4846
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004847 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004848 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4849 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004850 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004851
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004852 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
4853 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004854 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004855
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004856 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004857
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004858 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
4859 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004860 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
4861 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004862 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
4863 ReturnedEarly = true;
4864 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004865 }
4866
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004867 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
4868 // possible.
4869 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
4870 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
4871 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
4872 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
4873 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
4874 }
4875 }
4876
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004877 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004878 }
4879
4880 if (!ReturnedEarly)
4881 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
4882
4883 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004884 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004885 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004886
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004887 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004888 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004889 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4890 }
4891 SI->eraseFromParent();
4892
4893 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004894 if (NeedMask)
4895 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004896 return true;
4897}
4898
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004899bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004900 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
4901
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004902 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
4903 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
4904 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
4905 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
4906 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004907 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00004908
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004909 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
4910 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
4911 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004912 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00004913
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004914 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
4915 // away into any preds.
4916 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
4917 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4918 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4919 ++BBI;
4920 if (SI == &*BBI)
4921 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004922 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004923 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004924
4925 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004926 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004927 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004928
4929 // Remove unreachable cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004930 if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, AC, DL))
4931 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004932
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004933 if (SwitchToSelect(SI, Builder, AC, DL))
4934 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004935
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004936 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004937 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004938
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004939 if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
4940 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004941
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004942 return false;
4943}
4944
4945bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
4946 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
4947 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004948
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004949 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
4950 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
4951 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
4952 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00004953 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004954 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
4955 IBI->removeDestination(i);
4956 --i; --e;
4957 Changed = true;
4958 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004959 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004960
4961 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
4962 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
4963 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
4964 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
4965 return true;
4966 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004967
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004968 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
4969 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
4970 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
4971 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
4972 return true;
4973 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004974
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004975 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
4976 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004977 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004978 }
4979 return Changed;
4980}
4981
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00004982/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
4983/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
4984/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
4985/// a shared handler.
4986///
4987/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
4988/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
4989/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
4990/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
4991/// sinking in this file)
4992///
4993/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
4994/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
4995/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
4996/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
4997/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't loose any ability to
4998/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
4999///
5000/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5001/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5002/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5003static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5004 BasicBlock *BB) {
5005 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5006 assert(Succ);
5007 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5008 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5009 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5010 return false;
5011
5012 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5013 if (BB == OtherPred)
5014 continue;
5015 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5016 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5017 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5018 continue;
5019 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {}
5020 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5021 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5022 continue;
5023
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005024 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005025 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
5026 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
5027 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5028 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5029 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
5030 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB &&
5031 II->getUnwindDest() == BB && "unexpected successor");
5032 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5033 }
5034
5035 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5036 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
5037 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end();
5038 I != E;) {
5039 Instruction &Inst = *I; I++;
5040 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5041 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5042 }
5043
5044 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
5045 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5046 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5047 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5048 }
5049
5050 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5051 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5052 BI->eraseFromParent();
5053 return true;
5054 }
5055 return false;
5056}
5057
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00005058bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder){
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005059 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005060
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00005061 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
5062 return true;
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005063
5064 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
5065 // if LoopHeader is provided, check if the block is a loop header
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005066 // (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and vectorization
5067 // to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops.
5068 // These blocks can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later
5069 // in the back-end.)
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005070 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005071 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Hans Wennborge9134892016-04-11 20:35:01 +00005072 (!LoopHeaders || !LoopHeaders->count(BB)) &&
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005073 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
5074 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005075
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005076 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison
5077 // against a constant, try to simplify the block.
5078 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5079 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5080 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5081 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005082 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005083 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI,
5084 BonusInstThreshold, AC))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005085 return true;
5086 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005087
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005088 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5089 // equivalent.
5090 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
5091 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {}
5092 if (I->isTerminator() &&
5093 TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
5094 return true;
5095 }
5096
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005097 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5098 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5099 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5100 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005101 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
5102 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005103 return false;
5104}
5105
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005106static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5107 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5108 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5109 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5110 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5111 return nullptr;
5112 PredPred = PPred;
5113 }
5114 return PredPred;
5115}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005116
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005117bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005118 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005119
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005120 // Conditional branch
5121 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5122 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5123 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5124 // switch.
5125 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005126 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005127 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005128
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005129 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5130 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5131 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
5132 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5133 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5134 ++I;
5135 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005136 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005137 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005138 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())){
5139 ++I;
5140 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5141 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5142 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005143 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005144 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005145 }
5146 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005147
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005148 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005149 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005150 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005151
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005152 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5153 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5154 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005155 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
5156 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005157
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005158 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5159 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5160 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5161 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005162 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5163 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005164 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
5165 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005166 } else {
5167 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005168 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005169 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
5170 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5171 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005172 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
5173 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005174 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005175 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005176 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005177 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005178 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
5179 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5180 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005181 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
5182 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005183 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005184
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005185 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5186 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5187 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5188 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005189 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005190 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005191
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005192 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005193 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5194 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005195 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005196 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005197 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005198
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005199 // Look for diamond patterns.
5200 if (MergeCondStores)
5201 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5202 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5203 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
5204 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
5205 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
5206
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005207 return false;
5208}
5209
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005210/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5211static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5212 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5213 if (!C)
5214 return false;
5215
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005216 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005217 return false;
5218
5219 if (C->isNullValue()) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005220 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005221 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005222
5223 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5224 // control flow (eg. calls)
5225 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I); &*i != Use; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005226 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005227 return false;
5228
5229 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5230 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5231 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5232 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5233
5234 // Look through bitcasts.
5235 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5236 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5237
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005238 // Load from null is undefined.
5239 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005240 if (!LI->isVolatile())
5241 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005242
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005243 // Store to null is undefined.
5244 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005245 if (!SI->isVolatile())
5246 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 && SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005247 }
5248 return false;
5249}
5250
5251/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005252/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005253static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
5254 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
5255 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
5256 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5257 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
5258 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
5259 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5260 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
5261 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
5262 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5263 // destination from conditional branches.
5264 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5265 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5266 else
5267 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1) :
5268 BI->getSuccessor(0));
5269 BI->eraseFromParent();
5270 return true;
5271 }
5272 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5273 }
5274
5275 return false;
5276}
5277
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005278bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00005279 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005280
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005281 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005282 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005283
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005284 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
5285 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Ramkumar Ramachandra181233b2015-01-13 04:17:47 +00005286 if ((pred_empty(BB) &&
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005287 BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005288 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00005289 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
5290 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
5291 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005292 }
5293
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005294 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
5295 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00005296 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005297
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00005298 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
5299 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
5300
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005301 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
5302 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
5303
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00005304 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
5305 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
5306 // if there are no PHI nodes.
5307 //
5308 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
5309 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005310
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00005311 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
5312
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005313 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
5314 // eliminate it, do so now.
5315 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
5316 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005317 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005318
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005319 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005320 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005321 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00005322 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005323 } else {
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005324 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005325 }
5326 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00005327 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder)) return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00005328 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5329 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder)) return true;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00005330 } else if (CleanupReturnInst *RI =
5331 dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5332 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005333 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005334 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005335 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
5336 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5337 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005338 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
5339 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5340 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI)) return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00005341 }
5342
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005343 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005344}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005345
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005346/// This function is used to do simplification of a CFG.
5347/// For example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop,
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005348/// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization
5349/// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made.
5350///
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005351bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005352 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
5353 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005354 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(),
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005355 BonusInstThreshold, AC, LoopHeaders).run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005356}